blob: 896da1d3a6b19db630369102bfd936b843749ea6 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
14#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000015#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
16#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
17#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
18#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000021#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000023#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000025#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000026#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000027#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
28#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
29#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
30#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
34#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000038#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000039#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000040#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000041#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000042#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000043#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
44#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000045#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +000046#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000047#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000048#include <algorithm>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000049#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000050#include <set>
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000051using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000052using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000053
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000054#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
55
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000056// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
57// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
58// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
59// minimum reasonable default.
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000060static cl::opt<unsigned>
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000061PHINodeFoldingThreshold("phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
62 cl::desc("Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000063
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000064static cl::opt<bool>
65DupRet("simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
66 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
67
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000068static cl::opt<bool>
69SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
70 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
71
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +000072static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
73 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
74 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +000075
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +000076STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +000077STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +000078STATISTIC(NumLookupTables, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +000079STATISTIC(NumLookupTablesHoles, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +000080STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000081STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons, "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +000082STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +000083
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +000084namespace {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +000085 // The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
86 // case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the cases
87 // composing the case group.
88 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
89 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
90 // The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
91 // and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the switch
92 // for that PHI.
93 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
94
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +000095 /// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
96 struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
97 ConstantInt *Value;
98 BasicBlock *Dest;
99
100 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
101 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
102
103 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
104 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
105 return Value < RHS.Value;
106 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000107
108 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000109 };
110
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000111class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000112 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000113 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000114 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +0000115 AssumptionCache *AC;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000116 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
117 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000118 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000119 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000120 BasicBlock *Pred,
121 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000122 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
123 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000124
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000125 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000126 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000127 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000128 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000129 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000130 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <> &Builder);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000131 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <>&Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000132
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000133public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000134 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
135 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC)
136 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), AC(AC) {}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000137 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
138};
139}
140
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000141/// SafeToMergeTerminators - Return true if it is safe to merge these two
142/// terminator instructions together.
143///
144static bool SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2) {
145 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000146
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000147 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
148 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
149 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
150 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
151 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Chris Lattnerb7b75142007-04-02 01:44:59 +0000152 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000153
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000154 for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I)
155 if (SI1Succs.count(*I))
156 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin();
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000157 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
158 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
159 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
160 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB))
161 return false;
162 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000163
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000164 return true;
165}
166
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000167/// isProfitableToFoldUnconditional - Return true if it is safe and profitable
168/// to merge these two terminator instructions together, where SI1 is an
169/// unconditional branch. PhiNodes will store all PHI nodes in common
170/// successors.
171///
172static bool isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1,
173 BranchInst *SI2,
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000174 Instruction *Cond,
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000175 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode*> &PhiNodes) {
176 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
177 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
178
179 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000180 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000181 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
182 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
183 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
184 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
185 if (!Ci2) return false;
186 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
187 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
188 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
189 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
190 return false;
191
192 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
193 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
194 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000195 for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I)
196 if (SI1Succs.count(*I))
197 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin();
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000198 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
199 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
200 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000201 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000202 return false;
203 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
204 }
205 return true;
206}
207
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000208/// AddPredecessorToBlock - Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will
209/// now be entries in it from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be
210/// flowing into the PHI nodes will be the same as those coming in from
211/// ExistPred, an existing predecessor of Succ.
212static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
213 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000214 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin())) return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000215
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000216 PHINode *PN;
217 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
218 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
219 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000220}
221
David Majnemer91142c42013-06-01 19:43:23 +0000222/// ComputeSpeculationCost - Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000223/// given instruction, which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means
224/// cheap, TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
225/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000226static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000227 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000228 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000229 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000230 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000231}
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000232/// DominatesMergePoint - If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as
233/// accepted above, return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
234/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
235/// which works well enough for us.
236///
237/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000238/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
239/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
240/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
241/// set and true is returned.
242///
243/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
244/// Select whose cost is 2.
245///
246/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
247/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
248/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000249static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Craig Topper71b7b682014-08-21 05:55:13 +0000250 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction*> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000251 unsigned &CostRemaining,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000252 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000253 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000254 if (!I) {
255 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
256 // can be executed unconditionally.
257 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
258 if (C->canTrap())
259 return false;
260 return true;
261 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000262 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000263
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000264 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000265 // the bottom of this block.
266 if (PBB == BB) return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000267
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000268 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
269 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000270 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
271 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000272 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000273 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000274
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000275 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
276 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000277 if (!AggressiveInsts) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000278
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000279 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
280 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I)) return true;
281
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000282 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
283 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
284 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000285 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000286 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000287
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000288 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000289
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000290 if (Cost > CostRemaining)
291 return false;
292
293 CostRemaining -= Cost;
294
295 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
296 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000297 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000298 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000299 return false;
300 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
301 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000302 return true;
303}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000304
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000305/// GetConstantInt - Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
306/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000307static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000308 // Normal constant int.
309 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000310 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000311 return CI;
312
313 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
314 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000315 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000316
317 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
318 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
319 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
320
321 // IntToPtr const int.
322 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
323 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
324 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
325 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
326 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
327 return CI;
328 else
329 return cast<ConstantInt>
330 (ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
331 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000332 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000333}
334
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000335namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000336
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000337/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
338/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
339/// structure.
340/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
341/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
342/// representing the different cases for the switch.
343/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
344/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
345/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
346/// fail.
347struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000348 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000349 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
350 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
351 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
352 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000353
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000354 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000355 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
356 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
357 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000358 }
359
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000360 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000361 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000362 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000363 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000364
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000365private:
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000366
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000367 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
368 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
369 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
370 if(CompValue && CompValue != NewVal) return false;
371 CompValue = NewVal;
372 return (CompValue != nullptr);
373 }
374
375 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
376 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
377 /// match depending on isEQ).
378 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
379 /// against is placed in CompValue.
380 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
381 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000382 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000383 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
384 ICmpInst *ICI;
385 ConstantInt *C;
386 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
387 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
388 return false;
389 }
390
391 Value *RHSVal;
392 ConstantInt *RHSC;
393
394 // Pattern match a special case
395 // (x & ~2^x) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^x
396 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
397 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ:ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
398 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
399 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) {
400 APInt Not = ~RHSC->getValue();
401 if (Not.isPowerOf2()) {
402 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
403 if(!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
404 return false;
405
406 Vals.push_back(C);
407 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
408 C->getValue() | Not));
409 UsedICmps++;
410 return true;
411 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000412 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000413
414 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
415 if(!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
416 return false;
417
418 UsedICmps++;
419 Vals.push_back(C);
420 return ICI->getOperand(0);
421 }
422
423 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
424 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeICmpRegion(ICI->getPredicate(),
425 C->getValue());
426
427 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
428 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
429 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
430 if(match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) {
431 Span = Span.subtract(RHSC->getValue());
432 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
433 }
434
435 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
436 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
437 // x != 0 && x != 1.
438 if (!isEQ)
439 Span = Span.inverse();
440
441 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
442 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
443 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000444 }
445
446 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000447 if(!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
448 return false;
449
450 // Add all values from the range to the set
451 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
452 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000453
454 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000455 return true;
456
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000457 }
458
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000459 /// gather - Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
460 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
461 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
462 /// vector.
463 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000464 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000465 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
466 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000467
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000468 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
469 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000470
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000471 // Initialize
472 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000473
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000474 while(!DFT.empty()) {
475 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000476
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000477 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
478 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
479 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
480 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
481 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
482 continue;
483 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000484
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000485 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000486 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000487 // Match succeed, continue the loop
488 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000489 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000490
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000491 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
492 // comparison against the same value as the others.
493 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
494 if (!Extra) {
495 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000496 continue;
497 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000498 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
499 CompValue = nullptr;
500 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000501 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000502 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000503};
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000504
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000505}
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000506
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000507static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000508 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000509 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
510 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
511 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
512 if (BI->isConditional())
513 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000514 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
515 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000516 }
517
518 TI->eraseFromParent();
519 if (Cond) RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
520}
521
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000522/// isValueEqualityComparison - Return true if the specified terminator checks
523/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000524Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000525 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000526 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
527 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
528 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000529 if (SI->getNumSuccessors()*std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
530 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <= 128)
531 CV = SI->getCondition();
532 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000533 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000534 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000535 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000536 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000537 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000538
539 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000540 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000541 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
542 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000543 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000544 CV = Ptr;
545 }
546 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000547 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000548}
549
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000550/// GetValueEqualityComparisonCases - Given a value comparison instruction,
551/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000552BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000553GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000554 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase>
555 &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000556 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000557 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
558 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e; ++i)
559 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(),
560 i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000561 return SI->getDefaultDest();
562 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000563
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000564 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000565 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000566 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
567 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1),
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000568 DL),
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000569 Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000570 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000571}
572
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000573
574/// EliminateBlockCases - Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
575/// in the list that match the specified block.
576static void EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
577 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000578 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000579}
580
581/// ValuesOverlap - Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as
582/// well.
583static bool
584ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
585 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase > &C2) {
586 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
587
588 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
589 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
590 std::swap(V1, V2);
591
592 if (V1->size() == 0) return false;
593 if (V1->size() == 1) {
594 // Just scan V2.
595 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
596 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
597 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
598 return true;
599 }
600
601 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
602 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
603 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
604 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
605 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
606 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
607 return true;
608 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
609 ++i1;
610 else
611 ++i2;
612 }
613 return false;
614}
615
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000616/// SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor - If TI is known to be a
617/// terminator instruction and its block is known to only have a single
618/// predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is also a value
619/// comparison with the same value, and if that comparison determines the
620/// outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a very limited
621/// form of jump threading.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000622bool SimplifyCFGOpt::
623SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000624 BasicBlock *Pred,
625 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000626 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
627 if (!PredVal) return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
628
629 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
630 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
631 if (ThisVal != PredVal) return false; // Different predicates.
632
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000633 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
634 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
635
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000636 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000637 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000638 BasicBlock *PredDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(),
639 PredCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000640 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000641
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000642 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000643 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000644 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000645 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000646
647 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
648 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
649 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
650 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
651 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
652 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000653 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000654 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000655
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000656 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
657 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
658 // uncond br.
659 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
660 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000661 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000662 (void) NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000663
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000664 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000665 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000666
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000667 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
668 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000669
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000670 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
671 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000672 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000673
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000674 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
675 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000676 SmallPtrSet<Constant*, 16> DeadCases;
677 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
678 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000679
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000680 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000681 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000682
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000683 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
684 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000685 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000686 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
687 if (HasWeight)
688 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
689 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000690 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000691 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
692 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000693 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
694 --i;
695 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000696 if (HasWeight) {
697 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
698 Weights.pop_back();
699 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000700 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
701 SI->removeCase(i);
702 }
703 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000704 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000705 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
706 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
707 createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000708
709 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000710 return true;
711 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000712
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000713 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
714 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000715 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000716 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000717 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
718 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000719 if (TIV)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000720 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
721 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
722 }
723 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000724
725 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
726 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000727 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000728 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
729 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
730 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
731 break;
732 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000733
734 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000735 if (!TheRealDest) TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000736
737 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
738 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000739 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(TIBB), e = succ_end(TIBB); SI != e; ++SI)
740 if (*SI != CheckEdge)
741 (*SI)->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000742 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000743 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000744
745 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000746 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000747 (void) NI;
748
749 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
750 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
751
752 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
753 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000754}
755
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000756namespace {
757 /// ConstantIntOrdering - This class implements a stable ordering of constant
758 /// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
759 /// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
760 struct ConstantIntOrdering {
761 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
762 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
763 }
764 };
765}
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000766
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000767static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
768 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
769 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
770 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000771 if (LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()))
772 return 1;
773 if (LHS->getValue() == RHS->getValue())
774 return 0;
775 return -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000776}
777
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000778static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction* I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000779 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000780 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
781 if (MDString* MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
782 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
783
784 return false;
785}
786
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000787/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
788/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
789/// metadata.
790static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
791 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000792 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000793 assert(MD);
794 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000795 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000796 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000797 }
798
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000799 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
800 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
801 // default weight to be the first entry.
802 if (BranchInst* BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
803 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
804 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
805 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
806 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000807 }
808}
809
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000810/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000811static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000812 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
813 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
814 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
815 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
816 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000817 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000818}
819
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000820/// FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors - The specified terminator is a value
821/// equality comparison instruction (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
822/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
823/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000824bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
825 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000826 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
827 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
828 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
829 bool Changed = false;
830
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000831 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000832 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000833 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000834
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000835 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
836 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
837 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
838
839 if (PCV == CV && SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI)) {
840 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000841 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000842 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
843
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000844 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000845 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
846
847 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
848 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
849 // build.
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000850 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000851
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000852 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
853 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000854 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
855 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
856
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000857 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000858 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000859 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000860 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
861 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
862 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000863 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
864 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
865 // successor's weights
866 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000867
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000868 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000869 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000870 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000871 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000872 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
873 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
874 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000875 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000876
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000877 if (PredDefault == BB) {
878 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
879 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000880 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
881 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
882 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
883 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
884 else {
885 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
886 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000887
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000888 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
889 // Increase weight for the default case.
890 Weights[0] += Weights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000891 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
892 Weights.pop_back();
893 }
894
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000895 PredCases.pop_back();
896 --i; --e;
897 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000898
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000899 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000900 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
901 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
902 PredDefault = BBDefault;
903 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
904 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000905
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000906 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
907 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000908 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
909 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
910 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
911 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
912 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000913 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
914 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
915 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
916 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
917 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i+1]);
918 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000919 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000920 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000921
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000922 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
923 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
924 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
925 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
926 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
927 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
928 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
929 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000930 } else {
931 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
932 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
933 // activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000934 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000935 std::map<ConstantInt*, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000936 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
937 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
938 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000939
940 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
941 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i+1];
942 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
943 Weights.pop_back();
944 }
945
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000946 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
947 PredCases.pop_back();
948 --i; --e;
949 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000950
951 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
952 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000953 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
954 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
955 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000956 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
957 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000958 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
959 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
960 PTIHandled.erase(BBCases[i].Value);// This constant is taken care of
961 }
962
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000963 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
964 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000965 for (std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering>::iterator I =
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000966 PTIHandled.begin(),
967 E = PTIHandled.end(); I != E; ++I) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +0000968 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
969 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[*I]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000970 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(*I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000971 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000972 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000973 }
974
975 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
976 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
977 // successors.
978 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSuccessors.size(); i != e; ++i)
979 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessors[i], Pred, BB);
980
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000981 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000982 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +0000983 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000984 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000985 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000986 }
987
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000988 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000989 SwitchInst *NewSI = Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault,
990 PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +0000991 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000992 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
993 NewSI->addCase(PredCases[i].Value, PredCases[i].Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +0000994
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000995 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
996 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
997 FitWeights(Weights);
998
999 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1000
1001 NewSI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1002 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).
1003 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
1004 }
1005
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001006 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001007
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001008 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1009 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1010 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001011 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001012 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1013 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001014 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001015 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001016 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00001017 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
1018 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001019 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001020 }
1021 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1022 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001023
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001024 Changed = true;
1025 }
1026 }
1027 return Changed;
1028}
1029
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001030// isSafeToHoistInvoke - If we would need to insert a select that uses the
1031// value of this invoke (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we
1032// would need to do this), we can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere
1033// to put the select in this case.
1034static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1035 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001036 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001037 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001038 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001039 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1040 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1041 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1042 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V==I1 || BB2V==I2)) {
1043 return false;
1044 }
1045 }
1046 }
1047 return true;
1048}
1049
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001050static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1051
Chris Lattnerd683bdd2005-08-03 17:59:45 +00001052/// HoistThenElseCodeToIf - Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001053/// BB2, hoist any common code in the two blocks up into the branch block. The
1054/// caller of this function guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001055static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001056 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001057 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1058 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1059 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1060 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1061 // identical order.
1062 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1063 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
1064
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001065 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1066 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1067
1068 Instruction *I1 = BB1_Itr++, *I2 = BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001069 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1070 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1071 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1072 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1073 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1074 I1 = BB1_Itr++;
1075 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1076 I2 = BB2_Itr++;
1077 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001078 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001079 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001080 return false;
1081
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001082 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001083
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001084 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001085 do {
1086 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1087 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1088 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1089 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001090
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001091 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1092 return Changed;
1093
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001094 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1095 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1096 // the now redundant second instruction.
1097 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI, BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1098 if (!I2->use_empty())
1099 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Dan Gohmanc8a27f22009-08-25 22:11:20 +00001100 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001101 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {
1102 LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1103 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1104 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
Philip Reamesd92c2a72014-10-22 16:37:13 +00001105 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1106 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001107 };
1108 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001109 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001110 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001111
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001112 I1 = BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001113 I2 = BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001114 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1115 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1116 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1117 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1118 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1119 I1 = BB1_Itr++;
1120 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1121 I2 = BB2_Itr++;
1122 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001123 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001124
1125 return true;
1126
1127HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001128 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1129 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001130 return Changed;
1131
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001132 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001133 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001134 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001135 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1136 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1137 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1138 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1139 continue;
1140
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001141 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1142 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1143 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1144 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
1145 return Changed;
1146
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001147 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001148 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001149 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001150 return Changed;
1151 }
1152 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001153
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001154 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001155 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001156 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI, NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001157 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001158 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1159 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001160 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001161 }
1162
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001163 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001164 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1165 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1166 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1167 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
1168 std::map<std::pair<Value*,Value*>, SelectInst*> InsertedSelects;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001169 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001170 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001171 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001172 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001173 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1174 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001175 if (BB1V == BB2V) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001176
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001177 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1178 // that determines the right value.
1179 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001180 if (!SI)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001181 SI = cast<SelectInst>
1182 (Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1183 BB1V->getName()+"."+BB2V->getName()));
1184
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001185 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1186 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1187 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1188 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001189 }
1190 }
1191
1192 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001193 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI)
1194 AddPredecessorToBlock(*SI, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001195
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001196 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001197 return true;
1198}
1199
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001200/// SinkThenElseCodeToEnd - Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
1201/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1202/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1203/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1204static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1205 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
1206 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI1->getParent();
1207 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1208
1209 // Check that BBEnd has two predecessors and the other predecessor ends with
1210 // an unconditional branch.
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001211 pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BBEnd), PE = pred_end(BBEnd);
1212 BasicBlock *Pred0 = *PI++;
1213 if (PI == PE) // Only one predecessor.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001214 return false;
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001215 BasicBlock *Pred1 = *PI++;
1216 if (PI != PE) // More than two predecessors.
1217 return false;
1218 BasicBlock *BB2 = (Pred0 == BB1) ? Pred1 : Pred0;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001219 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB2->getTerminator());
1220 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isUnconditional())
1221 return false;
1222
1223 // Gather the PHI nodes in BBEnd.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001224 SmallDenseMap<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, PHINode *> JointValueMap;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001225 Instruction *FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001226 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BBEnd->begin(), E = BBEnd->end(); I != E; ++I) {
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001227 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
1228 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001229 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001230 JointValueMap[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)] = PN;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001231 } else {
1232 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I;
1233 break;
1234 }
1235 }
1236 if (!FirstNonPhiInBBEnd)
1237 return false;
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001238
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001239 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1240 // instructions in the two blocks. We scan backward for obviously identical
1241 // instructions in an identical order.
1242 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI1 = BB1->getInstList().rbegin(),
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001243 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend(),
1244 RI2 = BB2->getInstList().rbegin(),
1245 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001246 // Skip debug info.
1247 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1248 if (RI1 == RE1)
1249 return false;
1250 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1251 if (RI2 == RE2)
1252 return false;
1253 // Skip the unconditional branches.
1254 ++RI1;
1255 ++RI2;
1256
1257 bool Changed = false;
1258 while (RI1 != RE1 && RI2 != RE2) {
1259 // Skip debug info.
1260 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1261 if (RI1 == RE1)
1262 return Changed;
1263 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1264 if (RI2 == RE2)
1265 return Changed;
1266
1267 Instruction *I1 = &*RI1, *I2 = &*RI2;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001268 auto InstPair = std::make_pair(I1, I2);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001269 // I1 and I2 should have a single use in the same PHI node, and they
1270 // perform the same operation.
1271 // Cannot move control-flow-involving, volatile loads, vaarg, etc.
1272 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || isa<PHINode>(I2) ||
1273 isa<TerminatorInst>(I1) || isa<TerminatorInst>(I2) ||
1274 isa<LandingPadInst>(I1) || isa<LandingPadInst>(I2) ||
1275 isa<AllocaInst>(I1) || isa<AllocaInst>(I2) ||
1276 I1->mayHaveSideEffects() || I2->mayHaveSideEffects() ||
1277 I1->mayReadOrWriteMemory() || I2->mayReadOrWriteMemory() ||
1278 !I1->hasOneUse() || !I2->hasOneUse() ||
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001279 !JointValueMap.count(InstPair))
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001280 return Changed;
1281
1282 // Check whether we should swap the operands of ICmpInst.
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001283 // TODO: Add support of communativity.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001284 ICmpInst *ICmp1 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I1), *ICmp2 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I2);
1285 bool SwapOpnds = false;
1286 if (ICmp1 && ICmp2 &&
1287 ICmp1->getOperand(0) != ICmp2->getOperand(0) &&
1288 ICmp1->getOperand(1) != ICmp2->getOperand(1) &&
1289 (ICmp1->getOperand(0) == ICmp2->getOperand(1) ||
1290 ICmp1->getOperand(1) == ICmp2->getOperand(0))) {
1291 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1292 SwapOpnds = true;
1293 }
1294 if (!I1->isSameOperationAs(I2)) {
1295 if (SwapOpnds)
1296 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1297 return Changed;
1298 }
1299
1300 // The operands should be either the same or they need to be generated
1301 // with a PHI node after sinking. We only handle the case where there is
1302 // a single pair of different operands.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001303 Value *DifferentOp1 = nullptr, *DifferentOp2 = nullptr;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001304 unsigned Op1Idx = ~0U;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001305 for (unsigned I = 0, E = I1->getNumOperands(); I != E; ++I) {
1306 if (I1->getOperand(I) == I2->getOperand(I))
1307 continue;
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001308 // Early exit if we have more-than one pair of different operands or if
1309 // we need a PHI node to replace a constant.
1310 if (Op1Idx != ~0U ||
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001311 isa<Constant>(I1->getOperand(I)) ||
1312 isa<Constant>(I2->getOperand(I))) {
1313 // If we can't sink the instructions, undo the swapping.
1314 if (SwapOpnds)
1315 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1316 return Changed;
1317 }
1318 DifferentOp1 = I1->getOperand(I);
1319 Op1Idx = I;
1320 DifferentOp2 = I2->getOperand(I);
1321 }
1322
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001323 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK common instructions " << *I1 << "\n");
1324 DEBUG(dbgs() << " " << *I2 << "\n");
1325
1326 // We insert the pair of different operands to JointValueMap and
1327 // remove (I1, I2) from JointValueMap.
1328 if (Op1Idx != ~0U) {
1329 auto &NewPN = JointValueMap[std::make_pair(DifferentOp1, DifferentOp2)];
1330 if (!NewPN) {
1331 NewPN =
1332 PHINode::Create(DifferentOp1->getType(), 2,
1333 DifferentOp1->getName() + ".sink", BBEnd->begin());
1334 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp1, BB1);
1335 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp2, BB2);
1336 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Create PHI node " << *NewPN << "\n";);
1337 }
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001338 // I1 should use NewPN instead of DifferentOp1.
1339 I1->setOperand(Op1Idx, NewPN);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001340 }
Michael Liao5313da32014-12-23 08:26:55 +00001341 PHINode *OldPN = JointValueMap[InstPair];
1342 JointValueMap.erase(InstPair);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001343
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001344 // We need to update RE1 and RE2 if we are going to sink the first
1345 // instruction in the basic block down.
1346 bool UpdateRE1 = (I1 == BB1->begin()), UpdateRE2 = (I2 == BB2->begin());
1347 // Sink the instruction.
1348 BBEnd->getInstList().splice(FirstNonPhiInBBEnd, BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1349 if (!OldPN->use_empty())
1350 OldPN->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1351 OldPN->eraseFromParent();
1352
1353 if (!I2->use_empty())
1354 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1355 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Philip Reamesd92c2a72014-10-22 16:37:13 +00001356 // TODO: Use combineMetadata here to preserve what metadata we can
1357 // (analogous to the hoisting case above).
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001358 I2->eraseFromParent();
1359
1360 if (UpdateRE1)
1361 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend();
1362 if (UpdateRE2)
1363 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
1364 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = I1;
1365 NumSinkCommons++;
1366 Changed = true;
1367 }
1368 return Changed;
1369}
1370
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001371/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1372/// conditional block.
1373///
1374/// We are looking for code like the following:
1375/// BrBB:
1376/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1377/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1378/// ... // function).
1379/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1380/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1381/// ThenBB:
1382/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1383/// br label EndBB
1384/// EndBB:
1385/// ...
1386/// We are going to transform this into:
1387/// BrBB:
1388/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1389/// ... //
1390/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1391/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1392/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1393/// ...
1394///
1395/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1396/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001397static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1398 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001399 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1400 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001401 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001402
1403 // Volatile or atomic.
1404 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001405 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001406
1407 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1408
1409 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
1410 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 10;
1411 for (BasicBlock::reverse_iterator RI = BrBB->rbegin(),
1412 RE = BrBB->rend(); RI != RE && (--MaxNumInstToLookAt); ++RI) {
1413 Instruction *CurI = &*RI;
1414
1415 // Could be calling an instruction that effects memory like free().
1416 if (CurI->mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001417 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001418
1419 StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(CurI);
1420 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1421 if (SI && SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1422 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1423 return SI->getValueOperand();
1424 else if (SI)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001425 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001426 }
1427
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001428 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001429}
1430
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001431/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001432///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001433/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1434/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1435/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1436/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1437/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1438///
1439/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1440/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1441/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1442/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1443///
1444///
1445/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1446/// \code
1447/// BB:
1448/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1449/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1450/// ThenBB:
1451/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001452/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001453/// EndBB:
1454/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1455/// ...
1456/// \endcode
1457///
1458/// Into this IR:
1459/// \code
1460/// BB:
1461/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1462/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1463/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1464/// ...
1465/// \endcode
1466///
1467/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001468static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001469 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001470 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1471 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1472 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1473 return false;
1474
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001475 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1476 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1477
1478 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1479 // to swap the select operands later.
1480 bool Invert = false;
1481 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1482 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1483 Invert = true;
1484 }
1485 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1486
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001487 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1488 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1489 // - They are defined in BB, and
1490 // - They have no side effects, and
1491 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1492 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1493
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001494 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001495 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1496 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001497 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001498 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001499 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
1500 Instruction *I = BBI;
1501 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001502 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1503 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001504
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001505 // Only speculatively execution a single instruction (not counting the
1506 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001507 ++SpeculationCost;
1508 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001509 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001510
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001511 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001512 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1513 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1514 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001515 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001516 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001517 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1518 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001519 return false;
1520
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001521 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1522 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1523 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1524
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001525 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001526 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001527 // being sunk into the use block.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001528 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001529 i != e; ++i) {
1530 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001531 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB ||
1532 OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
1533 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1534
1535 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001536 }
1537 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001538
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001539 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1540 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1541 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
1542 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator I =
1543 SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(), E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
1544 I != E; ++I)
1545 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001546 ++SpeculationCost;
1547 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001548 return false;
1549 }
1550
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001551 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1552 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001553 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001554 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001555 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1556 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001557
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001558 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001559 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001560 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001561 continue;
1562
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001563 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
1564 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
1565 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
1566 return false;
1567
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001568 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001569 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
1570 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
1571 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001572 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
1573
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001574 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
1575 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001576 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001577 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
1578 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001579 unsigned MaxCost = 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold *
1580 TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
1581 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001582 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001583
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00001584 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
1585 // getting expanded into Instructions.
1586 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001587 // constant expression.
1588 ++SpeculationCost;
1589 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001590 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001591 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001592
1593 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
1594 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001595 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001596 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001597
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001598 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001599 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001600
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001601 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
1602 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
1603 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI);
1604 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
1605 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
1606 if (Invert)
1607 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
1608 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() +
1609 "." + FalseV->getName());
1610 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
1611 }
1612
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001613 // Hoist the instructions.
1614 BB->getInstList().splice(BI, ThenBB->getInstList(), ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001615 std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001616
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001617 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001618 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001619 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
1620 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
1621 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
1622 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
1623 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
1624 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
1625
1626 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
1627 if (OrigV == ThenV)
1628 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001629
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001630 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001631 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
1632 // destinations were inverted.
1633 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001634 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001635 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
1636 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV,
1637 TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName());
1638 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
1639 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001640 }
1641
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001642 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001643 return true;
1644}
1645
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001646/// \returns True if this block contains a CallInst with the NoDuplicate
1647/// attribute.
1648static bool HasNoDuplicateCall(const BasicBlock *BB) {
1649 for (BasicBlock::const_iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I) {
1650 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I);
1651 if (!CI)
1652 continue;
1653 if (CI->cannotDuplicate())
1654 return true;
1655 }
1656 return false;
1657}
1658
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001659/// BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough - Return true if we can thread a branch
1660/// across this block.
1661static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
1662 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001663 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001664
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00001665 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001666 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
1667 continue;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001668 if (Size > 10) return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001669 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001670
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001671 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001672 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001673 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
1674 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
1675 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI)) return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001676 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001677
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001678 // Looks ok, continue checking.
1679 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001680
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001681 return true;
1682}
1683
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001684/// FoldCondBranchOnPHI - If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value
1685/// that is defined in the same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are
1686/// constants, thread edges corresponding to that entry to be branches to their
1687/// ultimate destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001688static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001689 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1690 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00001691 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
1692 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001693 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
1694 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001695
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001696 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
1697 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00001698 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001699 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001700 }
1701
1702 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001703 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001704
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001705 if (HasNoDuplicateCall(BB)) return false;
1706
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001707 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
1708 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001709 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001710 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001711 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1)) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001712
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001713 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
1714 // branch to RealDest.
1715 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
1716 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001717
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001718 if (RealDest == BB) continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001719 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
1720 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator())) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001721
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001722 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
1723 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
1724 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
1725 // the edge we are about to create.
1726 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
1727 RealDest->getName()+".critedge",
1728 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
1729 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001730
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00001731 // Update PHI nodes.
1732 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001733
1734 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
1735 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
1736 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
1737 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
1738 DenseMap<Value*, Value*> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
1739 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
1740 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
1741 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
1742 continue;
1743 }
1744 // Clone the instruction.
1745 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
1746 if (BBI->hasName()) N->setName(BBI->getName()+".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001747
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001748 // Update operands due to translation.
1749 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end();
1750 i != e; ++i) {
1751 DenseMap<Value*, Value*>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
1752 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
1753 *i = PI->second;
1754 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001755
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001756 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001757 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001758 TranslateMap[BBI] = V;
1759 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001760 } else {
1761 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
1762 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
1763 if (!BBI->use_empty())
1764 TranslateMap[BBI] = N;
1765 }
1766 }
1767
1768 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
1769 // to EdgeBB instead.
1770 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
1771 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1772 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
1773 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
1774 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
1775 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001776
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001777 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001778 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001779 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001780
1781 return false;
1782}
1783
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001784/// FoldTwoEntryPHINode - Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry
1785/// PHI node, see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001786static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
1787 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001788 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
1789 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
1790 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
1791 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
1792 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
1793 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001794 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
1795 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
1796 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001797 if (!IfCond ||
1798 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
1799 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
1800 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001801
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00001802 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
1803 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
1804 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
1805 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
1806 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
1807 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
1808 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
1809 if (NumPhis > 2)
1810 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001811
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001812 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
1813 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
1814 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001815 SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00001816 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
1817 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001818 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
1819 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001820
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001821 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
1822 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001823 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001824 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001825 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001826 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001827 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001828
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001829 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001830 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001831 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001832 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001833 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001834 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001835
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00001836 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001837 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
1838 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001839 if (!PN) return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001840
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001841 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
1842 // often be turned into switches and other things.
1843 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
1844 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
1845 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
1846 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
1847 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001848
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001849 // If we all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all
1850 // instructions in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If
1851 // not, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so it's not
1852 // worth promoting to select instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001853 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001854 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
1855 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
1856 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001857 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001858 } else {
1859 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
1860 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Devang Patel2032cad2009-02-03 22:12:02 +00001861 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001862 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
1863 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control
1864 // flow, so the xform is not worth it.
1865 return false;
1866 }
1867 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001868
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001869 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001870 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001871 } else {
1872 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
1873 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Devang Patel2032cad2009-02-03 22:12:02 +00001874 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001875 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
1876 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control
1877 // flow, so the xform is not worth it.
1878 return false;
1879 }
1880 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001881
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00001882 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001883 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001884
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001885 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
1886 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001887 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001888 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001889
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001890 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
1891 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001892 if (IfBlock1)
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001893 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt,
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001894 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001895 IfBlock1->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001896 if (IfBlock2)
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001897 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt,
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001898 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001899 IfBlock2->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001900
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001901 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
1902 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001903 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
1904 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001905
1906 SelectInst *NV =
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001907 cast<SelectInst>(Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, ""));
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001908 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(NV);
1909 NV->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001910 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001911 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001912
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001913 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
1914 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
1915 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
1916 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001917 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
1918 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001919 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001920 return true;
1921}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001922
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001923/// SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns - If we found a conditional branch that goes
1924/// to two returning blocks, try to merge them together into one return,
1925/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001926static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001927 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001928 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
1929 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
1930 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
1931 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
1932 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001933
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001934 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
1935 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
1936 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001937 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001938 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001939 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001940 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001941
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001942 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001943 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
1944 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
1945 // branch into a return.
1946 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
1947 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
1948 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001949 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001950 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001951 return true;
1952 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001953
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001954 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
1955 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
1956 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
1957 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001958
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001959 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
1960 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
1961 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
1962 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
1963 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
1964 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
1965 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001966
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001967 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
1968 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
1969 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
1970 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
1971 // safe.
1972 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
1973 if (TCV->canTrap())
1974 return false;
1975 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
1976 if (FCV->canTrap())
1977 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001978
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001979 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
1980 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
1981 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
1982 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001983
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001984 // Insert select instructions where needed.
1985 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001986 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001987 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001988 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
1989 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
1990 TrueValue = FalseValue;
1991 } else {
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001992 TrueValue = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue,
1993 FalseValue, "retval");
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001994 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001995 }
1996
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001997 Value *RI = !TrueValue ?
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001998 Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
1999
Daniel Dunbar5e0a58b2009-08-23 10:29:55 +00002000 (void) RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002001
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002002 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002003 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
2004 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: "<< *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002005
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002006 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2007
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002008 return true;
2009}
2010
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002011/// ExtractBranchMetadata - Given a conditional BranchInstruction, retrieve the
2012/// probabilities of the branch taking each edge. Fills in the two APInt
2013/// parameters and return true, or returns false if no or invalid metadata was
2014/// found.
2015static bool ExtractBranchMetadata(BranchInst *BI,
2016 uint64_t &ProbTrue, uint64_t &ProbFalse) {
2017 assert(BI->isConditional() &&
2018 "Looking for probabilities on unconditional branch?");
2019 MDNode *ProfileData = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
2020 if (!ProfileData || ProfileData->getNumOperands() != 3) return false;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +00002021 ConstantInt *CITrue =
2022 mdconst::dyn_extract<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(1));
2023 ConstantInt *CIFalse =
2024 mdconst::dyn_extract<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(2));
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002025 if (!CITrue || !CIFalse) return false;
2026 ProbTrue = CITrue->getValue().getZExtValue();
2027 ProbFalse = CIFalse->getValue().getZExtValue();
2028 return true;
2029}
2030
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002031/// checkCSEInPredecessor - Return true if the given instruction is available
2032/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
2033///
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002034static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002035 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2036 return false;
2037 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = PB->begin(), E = PB->end(); I != E; I++) {
2038 Instruction *PBI = &*I;
2039 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2040 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2041 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2042 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2043 return true;
2044 }
2045 }
2046 return false;
2047}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002048
Chris Lattner7d4cdae2011-04-11 23:24:57 +00002049/// FoldBranchToCommonDest - If this basic block is simple enough, and if a
2050/// predecessor branches to us and one of our successors, fold the block into
2051/// the predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002052bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002053 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002054
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002055 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002056 if (BI->isConditional())
2057 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2058 else {
2059 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2060 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2061 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2062 // predecessor.
2063 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2064 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2065 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2066 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2067 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
2068 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end();
2069 I != E; ) {
2070 Instruction *Curr = I++;
2071 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2072 Cond = Curr;
2073 break;
2074 }
2075 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2076 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2077 return false;
2078 }
2079 }
2080
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002081 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002082 return false;
2083 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002084
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002085 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2086 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002087 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002088
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002089 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
2090 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = Cond; ++CondIt;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002091
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002092 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002093 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt)) ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002094
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002095 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002096 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002097
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002098 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2099 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2100 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2101 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2102 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2103 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
2104 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != I; ++I) {
2105 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2106 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2107 continue;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002108 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002109 return false;
2110 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2111 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2112 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2113 return false;
2114 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2115 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2116 // and Cond.
2117 ++NumBonusInsts;
2118 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2119 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2120 return false;
2121 }
2122
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002123 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2124 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2125 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2126 if (CE->canTrap())
2127 return false;
2128 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2129 if (CE->canTrap())
2130 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002131
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002132 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
2133 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002134 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002135 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2136 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002137
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002138 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2139 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002140 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002141
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002142 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2143 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2144 // blocks.
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002145 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002146 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002147 (BI->isConditional() &&
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002148 !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
2149 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2150 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002151 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002152
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002153 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002154 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002155 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002156
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002157 if (BI->isConditional()) {
2158 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest)
2159 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2160 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest)
2161 Opc = Instruction::And;
2162 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest)
2163 Opc = Instruction::And, InvertPredCond = true;
2164 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest)
2165 Opc = Instruction::Or, InvertPredCond = true;
2166 else
2167 continue;
2168 } else {
2169 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2170 continue;
2171 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002172
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002173 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002174 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002175
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002176 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2177 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002178 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002179
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002180 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2181 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2182 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2183 } else {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002184 NewCond = Builder.CreateNot(NewCond,
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002185 PBI->getCondition()->getName()+".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002186 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002187
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002188 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002189 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002190 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002191
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002192 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
2193 // Note that there may be mutliple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
2194 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2195 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2196 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
2197 // every instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
2198 // instructions.
2199 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
2200 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2201 continue;
2202 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2203 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
2204 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingEntries);
2205 VMap[BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002206
2207 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2208 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2209 // only given the branch precondition.
2210 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2211 // semantics we don't understand.
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002212 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_dbg);
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002213
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002214 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI, NewBonusInst);
2215 NewBonusInst->takeName(BonusInst);
2216 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002217 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002218
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002219 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2220 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002221 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002222 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
2223 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingEntries);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002224 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI, New);
2225 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002226 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002227
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002228 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002229 Instruction *NewCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002230 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(),
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002231 New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002232 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2233
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002234 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002235 bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight,
2236 PredFalseWeight);
2237 bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight,
2238 SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002239 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2240
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002241 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002242 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2243 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2244 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2245 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2246 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2247 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2248 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2249 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2250 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
2251 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2252 SuccTrueWeight) + PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2253 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002254 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2255 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2256 }
2257 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002258 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2259 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2260 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2261 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2262 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2263 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2264 SuccTrueWeight) + PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2265 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2266 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2267 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002268 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2269 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2270 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002271 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2272 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2273 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2274
2275 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),NewWeights.end());
2276 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2277 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).
2278 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2279 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002280 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002281 } else {
2282 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2283 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002284 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002285 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
2286 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002287 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002288 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2289 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2290 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2291 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
2292 Instruction *NotCond =
2293 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2294 "not.cond"));
2295 MergedCond =
2296 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2297 NotCond, New,
2298 "and.cond"));
2299 if (PBI_C->isOne())
2300 MergedCond =
2301 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2302 PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond,
2303 "or.cond"));
2304 } else {
2305 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2306 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2307 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002308 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002309 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2310 PBI->getCondition(), New,
2311 "and.cond"));
2312 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
2313 Instruction *NotCond =
2314 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2315 "not.cond"));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002316 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002317 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2318 NotCond, MergedCond,
2319 "or.cond"));
2320 }
2321 }
2322 // Update PHI Node.
2323 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2324 MergedCond);
2325 }
2326 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2327 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2328 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2329 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002330 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002331
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002332 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2333 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2334
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002335 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
2336 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I)
2337 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(*I))
2338 I->clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002339
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002340 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002341 }
2342 return false;
2343}
2344
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002345/// SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch - If we have a conditional branch as a
2346/// predecessor of another block, this function tries to simplify it. We know
2347/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
2348/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
2349static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI) {
2350 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
2351 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00002352
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002353 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002354 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002355 // this conditional branch redundant.
2356 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2357 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2358 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
2359 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
2360 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2361 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2362 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002363 BI->setCondition(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002364 CondIsTrue));
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002365 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
2366 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002367
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002368 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
2369 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
2370 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
2371 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002372 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002373 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Jay Foad52131342011-03-30 11:28:46 +00002374 std::distance(PB, PE),
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002375 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr",
2376 BB->begin());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00002377 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
2378 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
2379 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002380 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002381 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
2382 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002383 PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional() &&
2384 PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2385 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2386 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002387 NewPN->addIncoming(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002388 CondIsTrue), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002389 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002390 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002391 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002392 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002393
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002394 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002395 return true;
2396 }
2397 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002398
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002399 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002400 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002401 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00002402 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
2403 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2404 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2405 ++BBI;
2406 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002407 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002408
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002409
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002410 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
2411 if (CE->canTrap())
2412 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002413
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002414 int PBIOp, BIOp;
2415 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
2416 PBIOp = BIOp = 0;
2417 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
2418 PBIOp = 0, BIOp = 1;
2419 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
2420 PBIOp = 1, BIOp = 0;
2421 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
2422 PBIOp = BIOp = 1;
2423 else
2424 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002425
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002426 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
2427 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
2428 // keep getting unwound.
2429 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
2430 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002431
2432 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002433 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
2434 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002435
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002436 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
2437 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
2438 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
2439
2440 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002441 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2442 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002443 isa<PHINode>(II); ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002444 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
2445 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002446
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002447 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
2448 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2449 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
2450 if (CE->canTrap())
2451 return false;
2452
2453 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2454 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2455 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
2456 if (CE->canTrap())
2457 return false;
2458 }
2459
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002460 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002461 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002462
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002463 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002464 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002465
2466
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002467 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
2468 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
2469 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
2470 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
2471 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
2472 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
2473 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
2474 if (OtherDest == BB) {
2475 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
2476 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002477 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
2478 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002479 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
2480 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002481 }
2482
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002483 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002484
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002485 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
2486 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002487
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002488 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
2489 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002490 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002491 if (PBIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002492 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName()+".not");
2493
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002494 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
2495 if (BIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002496 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName()+".not");
2497
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002498 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002499 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002500
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002501 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
2502 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
2503 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
2504 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002505
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002506 // Update branch weight for PBI.
2507 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00002508 bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight,
2509 PredFalseWeight);
2510 bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight,
2511 SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002512 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2513 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
2514 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ?PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
2515 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
2516 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
2517 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
2518 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
2519 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00002520 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
2521 PredOther * SuccCommon,
2522 PredOther * SuccOther};
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002523 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2524 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2525
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002526 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00002527 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
2528 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002529 }
2530
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002531 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
2532 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002533 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002534
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002535 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
2536 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
2537 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
2538 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002539 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002540 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
2541 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
2542 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2543 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2544 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2545 if (BIV != PBIV) {
2546 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002547 Value *NV = cast<SelectInst>
2548 (Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName()+".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002549 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002550 }
2551 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002552
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002553 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
2554 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002555
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002556 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
2557 // one fewer predecessor.
2558 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002559}
2560
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002561// SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect - Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a
2562// branch to TrueBB if Cond is true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
2563// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
2564// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
2565// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
2566static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002567 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
2568 uint32_t TrueWeight,
2569 uint32_t FalseWeight){
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002570 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
2571 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
2572 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
2573 // successor.
2574 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002575 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002576
2577 // Then remove the rest.
2578 for (unsigned I = 0, E = OldTerm->getNumSuccessors(); I != E; ++I) {
2579 BasicBlock *Succ = OldTerm->getSuccessor(I);
2580 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
2581 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002582 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002583 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002584 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002585 else
2586 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent());
2587 }
2588
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002589 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
2590 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
2591
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002592 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002593 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002594 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
2595 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
2596 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002597 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002598 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002599 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
2600 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002601 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
2602 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
2603 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2604 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext()).
2605 createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
2606 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002607 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
2608 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
2609 // terminator must be unreachable.
2610 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
2611 } else {
2612 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
2613 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
2614 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002615 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002616 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002617 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002618 else
2619 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002620 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002621 }
2622
2623 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
2624 return true;
2625}
2626
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002627// SimplifySwitchOnSelect - Replaces
2628// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
2629// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
2630// unconditional otherwise.
2631static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
2632 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
2633 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
2634 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
2635 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
2636 return false;
2637
2638 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
2639 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00002640 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
2641 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002642
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002643 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
2644 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
2645 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
2646 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
2647 if (HasWeights) {
2648 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
2649 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
2650 TrueWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).
2651 getSuccessorIndex()];
2652 FalseWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).
2653 getSuccessorIndex()];
2654 }
2655 }
2656
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002657 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002658 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB,
2659 TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002660}
2661
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00002662// SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect - Replaces
2663// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
2664// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
2665// with
2666// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
2667static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
2668 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
2669 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
2670 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
2671 if (!TBA || !FBA)
2672 return false;
2673
2674 // Extract the actual blocks.
2675 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
2676 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
2677
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002678 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002679 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB,
2680 0, 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00002681}
2682
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002683/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt - This is called when we find an icmp
2684/// instruction (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
2685/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
2686/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
2687/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
2688/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
2689/// like:
2690///
2691/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
2692/// DEFAULT:
2693/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
2694/// br label %end
2695/// end:
2696/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002697///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002698/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
2699/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00002700static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002701 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
2702 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
2703 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002704 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00002705
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002706 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
2707 // complex.
2708 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse()) return false;
2709
2710 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
2711 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002712
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002713 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
2714 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
2715 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
2716 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002717 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator())) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002718
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002719 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
2720 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
2721 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002722
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002723 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
2724 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
2725 // away.
2726 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
2727 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
2728 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
2729 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002730
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002731 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002732 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002733 ICI->eraseFromParent();
2734 }
2735 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002736 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002737 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002738
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002739 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
2740 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
2741 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00002742 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002743 Value *V;
2744 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
2745 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
2746 else
2747 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002748
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002749 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
2750 ICI->eraseFromParent();
2751 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002752 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002753 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002754
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002755 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
2756 // the block.
2757 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002758 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002759 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002760 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
2761 return false;
2762
2763 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
2764 // true in the PHI.
2765 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
2766 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
2767
2768 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
2769 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
2770
2771 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
2772 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
2773 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
2774 ICI->eraseFromParent();
2775
2776 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
2777 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
2778 BasicBlock *NewBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge",
2779 BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00002780 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
2781 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
2782 if (HasWeights) {
2783 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
2784 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
2785 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
2786 Weights[0] = (Weights[0]+1) >> 1;
2787 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
2788
2789 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
2790 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2791 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).
2792 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2793 }
2794 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002795 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002796
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002797 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00002798 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
2799 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
2800 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002801 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
2802 return true;
2803}
2804
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002805/// SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain - The specified branch is a conditional branch.
2806/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
2807/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002808static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
2809 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002810 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002811 if (!Cond) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002812
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002813 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
2814 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
2815 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002816
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00002817 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00002818 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
2819 // Unpack the result
2820 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt*> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
2821 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
2822 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
2823 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002824
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002825 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002826 if (!CompVal) return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002827
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00002828 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
2829 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
2830 return false;
2831
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00002832 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
2833
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002834 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
2835 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
2836 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
2837 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002838
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002839 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
2840 // transformation. A switch with one value is just an cond branch.
2841 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002842
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00002843 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
2844 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
2845
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002846 // Figure out which block is which destination.
2847 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2848 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2849 if (!TrueWhenEqual) std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002850
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002851 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002852
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002853 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002854 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n" << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002855
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002856 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
2857 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
2858 // right before the condbr to handle it.
2859 if (ExtraCase) {
2860 BasicBlock *NewBB = BB->splitBasicBlock(BI, "switch.early.test");
2861 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
2862 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002863 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2864
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002865 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002866 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002867 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002868 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002869
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002870 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002871
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00002872 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
2873 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002874 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002875
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002876 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
2877 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002878 BB = NewBB;
2879 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002880
2881 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002882 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
2883 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002884 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
2885 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002886 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002887
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002888 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002889 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00002890
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002891 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
2892 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
2893 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002894
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002895 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
2896 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
2897 // the number of edges added.
2898 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin();
2899 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
2900 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
2901 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2902 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size()-1; i != e; ++i)
2903 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
2904 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002905
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002906 // Erase the old branch instruction.
2907 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002908
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002909 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002910 return true;
2911}
2912
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002913bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
2914 // If this is a trivial landing pad that just continues unwinding the caught
2915 // exception then zap the landing pad, turning its invokes into calls.
2916 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
2917 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
2918 if (RI->getValue() != LPInst)
2919 // Not a landing pad, or the resume is not unwinding the exception that
2920 // caused control to branch here.
2921 return false;
2922
2923 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
2924 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst, E = RI;
2925 while (++I != E)
2926 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2927 return false;
2928
2929 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002930 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
2931 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>((*PI++)->getTerminator());
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002932 SmallVector<Value*, 8> Args(II->op_begin(), II->op_end() - 3);
2933 // Insert a call instruction before the invoke.
2934 CallInst *Call = CallInst::Create(II->getCalledValue(), Args, "", II);
2935 Call->takeName(II);
2936 Call->setCallingConv(II->getCallingConv());
2937 Call->setAttributes(II->getAttributes());
2938 Call->setDebugLoc(II->getDebugLoc());
2939
2940 // Anything that used the value produced by the invoke instruction now uses
2941 // the value produced by the call instruction. Note that we do this even
2942 // for void functions and calls with no uses so that the callgraph edge is
2943 // updated.
2944 II->replaceAllUsesWith(Call);
2945 BB->removePredecessor(II->getParent());
2946
2947 // Insert a branch to the normal destination right before the invoke.
2948 BranchInst::Create(II->getNormalDest(), II);
2949
2950 // Finally, delete the invoke instruction!
2951 II->eraseFromParent();
2952 }
2953
Reid Klecknerf12b3342015-01-22 19:29:46 +00002954 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
2955 BB->eraseFromParent();
2956 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002957}
2958
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002959bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002960 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
2961 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator()) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002962
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002963 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
2964 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
2965 SmallVector<BranchInst*, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002966 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2967 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002968 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
2969 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
2970 if (BI->isUnconditional())
2971 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
2972 else
2973 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
2974 }
2975 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002976
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002977 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00002978 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002979 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
2980 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
2981 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
2982 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00002983 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002984 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002985
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002986 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Ramkumar Ramachandra40c3e032015-01-13 03:46:47 +00002987 if (pred_empty(BB))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002988 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
2989 BB->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002990
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002991 return true;
2992 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002993
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002994 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
2995 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
2996 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
2997 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
2998 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002999
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003000 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
3001 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
3002 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003003 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003004 return true;
3005 }
3006 return false;
3007}
3008
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003009bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
3010 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003011
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003012 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003013
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003014 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
3015 // be removed, do so.
3016 while (UI != BB->begin()) {
3017 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI;
3018 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003019 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
3020 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
3021 // operations may have this effect.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003022 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003023
3024 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
3025 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
3026 if (SI->isVolatile())
3027 break;
3028 } else if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
3029 if (LI->isVolatile())
3030 break;
3031 } else if (AtomicRMWInst *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
3032 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
3033 break;
3034 } else if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
3035 if (CXI->isVolatile())
3036 break;
3037 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
3038 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003039 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003040 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00003041 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
3042 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
3043 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
3044 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003045 }
3046
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00003047 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
3048 if (!BBI->use_empty())
3049 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003050 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003051 Changed = true;
3052 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003053
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003054 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
3055 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
3056 if (&BB->front() != UI) return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003057
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003058 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
3059 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3060 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003061 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003062 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
3063 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
3064 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
3065 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3066 TI->eraseFromParent();
3067 Changed = true;
3068 }
3069 } else {
3070 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003071 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003072 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3073 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003074 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003075 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3076 Changed = true;
3077 }
3078 }
3079 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003080 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003081 i != e; ++i)
3082 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003083 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
3084 SI->removeCase(i);
3085 --i; --e;
3086 Changed = true;
3087 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003088 } else if (InvokeInst *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
3089 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3090 // Convert the invoke to a call instruction. This would be a good
3091 // place to note that the call does not throw though.
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003092 BranchInst *BI = Builder.CreateBr(II->getNormalDest());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003093 II->removeFromParent(); // Take out of symbol table
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003094
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003095 // Insert the call now...
3096 SmallVector<Value*, 8> Args(II->op_begin(), II->op_end()-3);
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003097 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
3098 CallInst *CI = Builder.CreateCall(II->getCalledValue(),
Jay Foad5bd375a2011-07-15 08:37:34 +00003099 Args, II->getName());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003100 CI->setCallingConv(II->getCallingConv());
3101 CI->setAttributes(II->getAttributes());
3102 // If the invoke produced a value, the call does now instead.
3103 II->replaceAllUsesWith(CI);
3104 delete II;
3105 Changed = true;
3106 }
3107 }
3108 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003109
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003110 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Ramkumar Ramachandra40c3e032015-01-13 03:46:47 +00003111 if (pred_empty(BB) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003112 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
3113 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3114 BB->eraseFromParent();
3115 return true;
3116 }
3117
3118 return Changed;
3119}
3120
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003121static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
3122 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
3123
3124 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3125 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3126 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
3127 return false;
3128 }
3129 return true;
3130}
3131
3132/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
3133/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003134static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003135 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003136
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003137 bool HasDefault =
3138 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003139
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003140 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
3141 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
3142 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
3143 SmallVector <ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
3144 SmallVector <ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
3145
3146 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
3147 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
3148 if (!DestA) DestA = Dest;
3149 if (Dest == DestA) {
3150 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3151 continue;
3152 }
3153 if (!DestB) DestB = Dest;
3154 if (Dest == DestB) {
3155 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3156 continue;
3157 }
3158 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003159 }
3160
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003161 assert(DestA && DestB && "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
3162 assert(DestA != DestB);
3163 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
3164 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
3165 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
3166
3167 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
3168 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
3169 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
3170 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
3171 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
3172 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
3173 ContiguousDest = DestA;
3174 OtherDest = DestB;
3175 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
3176 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
3177 ContiguousDest = DestB;
3178 OtherDest = DestA;
3179 } else
3180 return false;
3181
3182 // Start building the compare and branch.
3183
3184 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
3185 Constant *NumCases = ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003186
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003187 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
3188 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003189 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
3190
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003191 Value *Cmp;
3192 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003193 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003194 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
3195 else
3196 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003197 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003198
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003199 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003200 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
3201 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003202 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3203 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003204 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
3205 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
3206 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3207 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
3208 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
3209 else
3210 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
3211 }
3212 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
3213 TrueWeight /= 2;
3214 FalseWeight /= 2;
3215 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003216 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003217 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(
3218 (uint32_t)TrueWeight, (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003219 }
3220 }
3221
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003222 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
3223 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3224 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
3225 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest()) ++PreviousEdges;
3226 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003227 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3228 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003229 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
3230 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
3231 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest()) ++PreviousEdges;
3232 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
3233 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3234 }
3235
3236 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003237 SI->eraseFromParent();
3238
3239 return true;
3240}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003241
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003242/// EliminateDeadSwitchCases - Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
3243/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003244static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
3245 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003246 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00003247 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003248 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00003249 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003250
3251 // Gather dead cases.
3252 SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 8> DeadCases;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003253 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003254 if ((I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownZero) != 0 ||
3255 (I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownOne) != KnownOne) {
3256 DeadCases.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003257 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case '"
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003258 << I.getCaseValue() << "' is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003259 }
3260 }
3261
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003262 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3263 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3264 if (HasWeight) {
3265 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3266 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
3267 }
3268
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003269 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
3270 for (unsigned I = 0, E = DeadCases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003271 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCases[I]);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003272 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003273 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003274 if (HasWeight) {
3275 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
3276 Weights.pop_back();
3277 }
3278
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003279 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003280 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003281 SI->removeCase(Case);
3282 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00003283 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003284 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
3285 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3286 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
3287 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
3288 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003289
3290 return !DeadCases.empty();
3291}
3292
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003293/// FindPHIForConditionForwarding - If BB would be eligible for simplification
3294/// by TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
3295/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
3296/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
3297/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
3298static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
3299 BasicBlock *BB,
3300 int *PhiIndex) {
3301 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003302 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003303 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003304 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003305
3306 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
3307 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003308 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003309
3310 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
3311
3312 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
3313 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
3314 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
3315 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
3316
3317 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3318 if (InValue != CaseValue) continue;
3319
3320 *PhiIndex = Idx;
3321 return PHI;
3322 }
3323
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003324 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003325}
3326
3327/// ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI - Try to forward the condition of a switch
3328/// instruction to a phi node dominated by the switch, if that would mean that
3329/// some of the destination blocks of the switch can be folded away.
3330/// Returns true if a change is made.
3331static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
3332 typedef DenseMap<PHINode*, SmallVector<int,4> > ForwardingNodesMap;
3333 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
3334
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003335 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003336 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
3337 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003338
3339 int PhiIndex;
3340 PHINode *PHI = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest,
3341 &PhiIndex);
3342 if (!PHI) continue;
3343
3344 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
3345 }
3346
3347 bool Changed = false;
3348
3349 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
3350 E = ForwardingNodes.end(); I != E; ++I) {
3351 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003352 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003353
3354 if (Indexes.size() < 2) continue;
3355
3356 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
3357 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
3358 Changed = true;
3359 }
3360
3361 return Changed;
3362}
3363
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003364/// ValidLookupTableConstant - Return true if the backend will be able to handle
3365/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Hans Wennborg08238ad2012-09-07 08:22:57 +00003366static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00003367 if (C->isThreadDependent())
3368 return false;
3369 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
3370 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003371
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00003372 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C))
3373 return CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing();
3374
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003375 return isa<ConstantFP>(C) ||
3376 isa<ConstantInt>(C) ||
3377 isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) ||
3378 isa<GlobalValue>(C) ||
3379 isa<UndefValue>(C);
3380}
3381
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003382/// LookupConstant - If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003383/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003384static Constant *LookupConstant(Value *V,
3385 const SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*>& ConstantPool) {
3386 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
3387 return C;
3388 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
3389}
3390
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003391/// ConstantFold - Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
3392/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
3393/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003394/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003395static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003396ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
3397 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003398 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003399 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
3400 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003401 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003402 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
3403 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
3404 if (A->isNullValue())
3405 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003406 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003407 }
3408
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003409 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
3410 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
3411 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
3412 COps.push_back(A);
3413 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003414 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003415 }
3416
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003417 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003418 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
3419 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003420 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003421
3422 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I->getOpcode(), I->getType(), COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003423}
3424
3425/// GetCaseResults - Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
3426/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003427/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003428/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003429static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003430GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003431 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003432 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
3433 const DataLayout &DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003434 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
3435 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
3436
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003437 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
3438 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
3439 SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*> ConstantPool;
3440 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
3441 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
3442 ++I) {
3443 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
3444 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
3445 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1)
3446 return false;
3447 Pred = CaseDest;
3448 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
3449 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3450 // Skip debug intrinsic.
3451 continue;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003452 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003453 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00003454
3455 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
3456 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
3457 // no longer dominate all its uses.
3458 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
3459 User *User = Use.getUser();
3460 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
3461 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
3462 continue;
3463 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
3464 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
3465 continue;
3466 return false;
3467 }
3468
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003469 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(I, C));
3470 } else {
3471 break;
3472 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003473 }
3474
3475 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
3476 if (!*CommonDest)
3477 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
3478 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
3479 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
3480 return false;
3481
3482 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
3483 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
3484 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
3485 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
3486 if (Idx == -1)
3487 continue;
3488
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003489 Constant *ConstVal = LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx),
3490 ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003491 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003492 return false;
3493
3494 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
3495 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal))
3496 return false;
3497
3498 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
3499 }
3500
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003501 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003502}
3503
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003504// MapCaseToResult - Helper function used to
3505// add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate Result.
3506static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
3507 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
3508 Constant *Result) {
3509 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
3510 if (I.first == Result) {
3511 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
3512 return;
3513 }
3514 }
3515 UniqueResults.push_back(std::make_pair(Result,
3516 SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
3517}
3518
3519// InitializeUniqueCases - Helper function that initializes a map containing
3520// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
3521// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
3522// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003523static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
3524 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
3525 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
3526 Constant *&DefaultResult,
3527 const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003528 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
3529 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
3530
3531 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
3532 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
3533 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
3534 DL))
3535 return false;
3536
3537 // Only one value per case is permitted
3538 if (Results.size() > 1)
3539 return false;
3540 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
3541
3542 // Check the PHI consistency.
3543 if (!PHI)
3544 PHI = Results[0].first;
3545 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
3546 return false;
3547 }
3548 // Find the default result value.
3549 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
3550 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
3551 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
3552 DL);
3553 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
3554 // is unreachable.
3555 DefaultResult =
3556 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
3557 if ((!DefaultResult &&
3558 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
3559 return false;
3560
3561 return true;
3562}
3563
3564// ConvertTwoCaseSwitch - Helper function that checks if it is possible to
3565// transform a switch with only two cases (or two cases + default)
3566// that produces a result into a value select.
3567// Example:
3568// switch (a) {
3569// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
3570// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
3571// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
3572// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
3573// default:
3574// return 4;
3575// }
3576static Value *
3577ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
3578 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
3579 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
3580 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
3581 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
3582 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
3583 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
3584 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
3585 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
3586 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
3587 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
3588
3589 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
3590 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
3591 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
3592 Value *const ValueCompare =
3593 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
3594 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
3595 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
3596 }
3597 Value *const ValueCompare =
3598 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
3599 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first, SelectValue,
3600 "switch.select");
3601 }
3602
3603 return nullptr;
3604}
3605
3606// RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion - Helper function to cleanup a switch
3607// instruction that has been converted into a select, fixing up PHI nodes and
3608// basic blocks.
3609static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
3610 Value *SelectValue,
3611 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
3612 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
3613 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
3614 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
3615 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
3616
3617 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
3618
3619 // Remove the switch.
3620 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
3621 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
3622
3623 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
3624 continue;
3625 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
3626 }
3627 SI->eraseFromParent();
3628}
3629
3630/// SwitchToSelect - If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
3631/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
3632/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
3633static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003634 AssumptionCache *AC, const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003635 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
3636 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
3637 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
3638 Constant *DefaultResult;
3639 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
3640 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003641 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
3642 DL))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00003643 return false;
3644 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
3645 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
3646 return false;
3647 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
3648
3649 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
3650 Value *SelectValue = ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(
3651 UniqueResults,
3652 DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
3653 if (SelectValue) {
3654 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
3655 return true;
3656 }
3657 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
3658 return false;
3659}
3660
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003661namespace {
3662 /// SwitchLookupTable - This class represents a lookup table that can be used
3663 /// to replace a switch.
3664 class SwitchLookupTable {
3665 public:
3666 /// SwitchLookupTable - Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement
3667 /// with the contents of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the
3668 /// table.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003669 SwitchLookupTable(
3670 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
3671 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
3672 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003673
3674 /// BuildLookup - Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
3675 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00003676 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003677
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003678 /// WouldFitInRegister - Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
3679 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003680 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003681 const Type *ElementType);
3682
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003683 private:
3684 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
3685 // different ways.
3686 enum {
3687 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
3688 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
3689 SingleValueKind,
3690
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00003691 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
3692 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
3693 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
3694 LinearMapKind,
3695
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003696 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
3697 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
3698 // shift and mask operations.
3699 BitMapKind,
3700
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003701 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
3702 // instructions from the table.
3703 ArrayKind
3704 } Kind;
3705
3706 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
3707 Constant *SingleValue;
3708
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003709 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
3710 ConstantInt *BitMap;
3711 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
3712
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00003713 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
3714 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
3715 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
3716
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003717 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
3718 GlobalVariable *Array;
3719 };
3720}
3721
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003722SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
3723 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
3724 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
3725 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003726 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00003727 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00003728 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
3729 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003730
3731 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003732 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003733
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003734 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
3735
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003736 // Build up the table contents.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003737 SmallVector<Constant*, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
3738 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3739 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
3740 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003741 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003742
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003743 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue())
3744 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003745 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
3746
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003747 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003748 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003749 }
3750
3751 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003752 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00003753 assert(DefaultValue &&
3754 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003755 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003756 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
3757 if (!TableContents[I])
3758 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003759 }
3760
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003761 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003762 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003763 }
3764
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003765 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
3766 // that single value.
3767 if (SingleValue) {
3768 Kind = SingleValueKind;
3769 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003770 }
3771
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00003772 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
3773 // table index.
3774 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
3775 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
3776 APInt PrevVal;
3777 APInt DistToPrev;
3778 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
3779 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
3780 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
3781 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
3782 if (!ConstVal) {
3783 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
3784 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
3785 LinearMappingPossible = false;
3786 break;
3787 }
3788 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
3789 if (I != 0) {
3790 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
3791 if (I == 1) {
3792 DistToPrev = Dist;
3793 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
3794 LinearMappingPossible = false;
3795 break;
3796 }
3797 }
3798 PrevVal = Val;
3799 }
3800 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
3801 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
3802 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
3803 Kind = LinearMapKind;
3804 ++NumLinearMaps;
3805 return;
3806 }
3807 }
3808
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003809 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003810 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003811 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003812 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
3813 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
3814 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00003815 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
3816 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
3817 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
3818 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
3819 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003820 }
3821 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
3822 BitMapElementTy = IT;
3823 Kind = BitMapKind;
3824 ++NumBitMaps;
3825 return;
3826 }
3827
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003828 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003829 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003830 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
3831
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003832 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/ true,
3833 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage,
3834 Initializer,
3835 "switch.table");
3836 Array->setUnnamedAddr(true);
3837 Kind = ArrayKind;
3838}
3839
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00003840Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003841 switch (Kind) {
3842 case SingleValueKind:
3843 return SingleValue;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00003844 case LinearMapKind: {
3845 // Derive the result value from the input value.
3846 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
3847 false, "switch.idx.cast");
3848 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
3849 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
3850 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
3851 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
3852 return Result;
3853 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003854 case BitMapKind: {
3855 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
3856 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
3857
3858 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
3859 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
3860 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +00003861 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003862
3863 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
3864 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(ShiftAmt,
3865 ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
3866 "switch.shiftamt");
3867
3868 // Shift down.
3869 Value *DownShifted = Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt,
3870 "switch.downshift");
3871 // Mask off.
3872 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy,
3873 "switch.masked");
3874 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003875 case ArrayKind: {
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00003876 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00003877 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
3878 uint64_t TableSize = Array->getInitializer()->getType()
3879 ->getArrayNumElements();
3880 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
3881 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(Index,
3882 IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(),
3883 IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
3884 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00003885
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003886 Value *GEPIndices[] = { Builder.getInt32(0), Index };
3887 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array, GEPIndices,
3888 "switch.gep");
3889 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
3890 }
3891 }
3892 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
3893}
3894
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003895bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003896 uint64_t TableSize,
3897 const Type *ElementType) {
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003898 const IntegerType *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
3899 if (!IT)
3900 return false;
3901 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
3902 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00003903
3904 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
3905 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX/IT->getBitWidth())
3906 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003907 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003908}
3909
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003910/// ShouldBuildLookupTable - Determine whether a lookup table should be built
Hans Wennborg5cf30be2013-06-04 11:22:30 +00003911/// for this switch, based on the number of cases, size of the table and the
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003912/// types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003913static bool
3914ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
3915 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
3916 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00003917 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
3918 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003919
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00003920 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00003921 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00003922 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
3923 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00003924
3925 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003926 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00003927
3928 // Saturate this flag to false.
3929 AllTablesFitInRegister = AllTablesFitInRegister &&
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003930 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00003931
3932 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
3933 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
3934 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
3935 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00003936 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003937 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00003938
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00003939 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
3940 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
3941 return true;
3942
3943 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
3944 if (HasIllegalType)
3945 return false;
3946
3947 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
3948 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
3949 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
3950 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003951}
3952
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00003953/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
3954/// \code
3955/// if (idx < tablesize)
3956/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
3957/// else
3958/// r = default_value;
3959/// if (r != default_value)
3960/// ...
3961/// \endcode
3962/// Is optimized to:
3963/// \code
3964/// cond = idx < tablesize;
3965/// if (cond)
3966/// r = table[idx];
3967/// else
3968/// r = default_value;
3969/// if (cond)
3970/// ...
3971/// \endcode
3972/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
3973static void reuseTableCompare(User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock,
3974 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch, Constant *DefaultValue,
3975 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*> >& Values) {
3976
3977 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
3978 if (!CmpInst)
3979 return;
3980
3981 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
3982 // threading can do its work afterwards.
3983 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
3984 return;
3985
3986 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
3987 if (!CmpOp1)
3988 return;
3989
3990 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
3991 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
3992 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
3993
3994 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
3995 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
3996 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
3997 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
3998 return;
3999
4000 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
4001 // compare result.
4002 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
4003 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4004 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
4005 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
4006 return;
4007 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
4008 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
4009 }
4010
4011 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
4012 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
4013 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
4014 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
4015 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
4016 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
4017 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
4018 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
4019 return;
4020 }
4021
4022 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
4023 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
4024 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
4025 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4026 } else {
4027 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
4028 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(RangeCmp,
4029 ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
4030 RangeCheckBranch);
4031 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
4032 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4033 }
4034}
4035
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004036/// SwitchToLookupTable - If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
4037/// phi nodes in a common successor block with different constant values,
4038/// replace the switch with lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004039static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4040 const DataLayout &DL,
4041 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004042 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004043
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00004044 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004045 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004046 return false;
4047
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004048 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
4049 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
4050
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004051 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
4052 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
4053 // string and lookup indices into that.
4054
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00004055 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make them
4056 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
4057 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004058 return false;
4059
4060 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
4061 // common destination, as well as the the min and max case values.
4062 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
4063 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
4064 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4065 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4066
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004067 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004068 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*>, 4> ResultListTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004069 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
4070 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Constant*> DefaultResults;
4071 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*> ResultTypes;
4072 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
4073
4074 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
4075 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4076 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
4077 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
4078 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
4079 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
4080
4081 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4082 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> ResultsTy;
4083 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004084 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004085 Results, DL))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004086 return false;
4087
4088 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004089 for (const auto &I : Results) {
4090 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4091 Constant *Value = I.second;
4092 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
4093 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
4094 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004095 }
4096 }
4097
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004098 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004099 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004100 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
4101 }
4102
4103 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
4104 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
4105 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
4106 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
4107
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004108 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
4109 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004110 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004111 bool HasDefaultResults = GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(),
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004112 &CommonDest, DefaultResultsList, DL);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004113
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004114 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
4115 if (NeedMask) {
4116 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
4117 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
4118 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004119 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004120 return false;
4121 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004122
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004123 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
4124 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4125 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00004126 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004127 }
4128
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004129 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004130 return false;
4131
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004132 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004133 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004134 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
4135 "switch.lookup",
4136 CommonDest->getParent(),
4137 CommonDest);
4138
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004139 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004140 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
4141 Value *TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
4142 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004143
4144 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
4145 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004146 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004147 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004148 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
4149 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
4150 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
4151
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004152 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
4153 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
4154 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
4155 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
4156 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4157 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004158 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
4159
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004160 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004161 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Manman Ren062f58d2014-08-02 23:41:54 +00004162 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
4163 // do not delete PHINodes here.
4164 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00004165 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004166 } else {
4167 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004168 MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004169 RangeCheckBranch = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004170 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004171
4172 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
4173 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004174
4175 if (NeedMask) {
4176 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
4177 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
4178 // and we create a new LookupBB.
4179 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
4180 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
4181 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
4182 "switch.lookup",
4183 CommonDest->getParent(),
4184 CommonDest);
4185
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00004186 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
4187 // unnecessary illegal types.
4188 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
4189 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
4190 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004191 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004192 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
4193 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4194 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() -
4195 MinCaseVal->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
4196 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
4197 }
4198 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
4199
4200 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
4201 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
4202 // else continue with table lookup.
4203 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
4204 Value *MaskIndex = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy,
4205 "switch.maskindex");
4206 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex,
4207 "switch.shifted");
4208 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(Shifted,
4209 Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()),
4210 "switch.lobit");
4211 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
4212
4213 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
4214 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
4215 }
4216
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004217 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004218 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4219 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004220 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004221
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004222 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
4223 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004224 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004225
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004226 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004227
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004228 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
4229 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004230 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
4231 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004232 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
4233 ReturnedEarly = true;
4234 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004235 }
4236
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004237 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
4238 // possible.
4239 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
4240 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
4241 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
4242 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
4243 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
4244 }
4245 }
4246
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004247 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004248 }
4249
4250 if (!ReturnedEarly)
4251 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
4252
4253 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004254 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004255 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004256
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004257 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004258 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004259 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4260 }
4261 SI->eraseFromParent();
4262
4263 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004264 if (NeedMask)
4265 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004266 return true;
4267}
4268
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004269bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004270 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
4271
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004272 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
4273 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
4274 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
4275 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
4276 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004277 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00004278
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004279 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
4280 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
4281 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004282 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00004283
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004284 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
4285 // away into any preds.
4286 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
4287 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4288 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4289 ++BBI;
4290 if (SI == &*BBI)
4291 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004292 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004293 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004294
4295 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004296 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004297 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004298
4299 // Remove unreachable cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004300 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, AC, DL))
4301 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004302
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004303 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, AC, DL))
4304 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004305
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004306 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004307 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004308
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004309 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
4310 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004311
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004312 return false;
4313}
4314
4315bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
4316 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
4317 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004318
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004319 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
4320 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
4321 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
4322 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00004323 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004324 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
4325 IBI->removeDestination(i);
4326 --i; --e;
4327 Changed = true;
4328 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004329 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004330
4331 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
4332 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
4333 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
4334 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
4335 return true;
4336 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004337
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004338 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
4339 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
4340 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
4341 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
4342 return true;
4343 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004344
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004345 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
4346 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004347 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004348 }
4349 return Changed;
4350}
4351
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00004352bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder){
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004353 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004354
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00004355 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
4356 return true;
4357
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004358 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
Rafael Espindolad07cf402014-07-30 21:04:00 +00004359 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004360 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
4361 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
4362 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004363
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004364 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
4365 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
4366 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
4367 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
4368 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
4369 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00004370 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004371 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
4372 BonusInstThreshold, AC))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004373 return true;
4374 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004375
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00004376 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
4377 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
4378 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
4379 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004380 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
4381 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004382 return false;
4383}
4384
4385
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004386bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004387 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004388
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004389 // Conditional branch
4390 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
4391 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
4392 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
4393 // switch.
4394 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004395 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004396 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004397
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004398 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
4399 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4400 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
4401 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4402 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
4403 ++I;
4404 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00004405 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004406 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004407 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())){
4408 ++I;
4409 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4410 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
4411 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00004412 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004413 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004414 }
4415 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004416
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004417 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004418 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004419 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004420
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00004421 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
4422 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
4423 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004424 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
4425 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004426
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004427 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
4428 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
4429 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
4430 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004431 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
4432 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004433 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
4434 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004435 } else {
4436 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00004437 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004438 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
4439 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
4440 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004441 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
4442 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004443 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004444 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004445 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00004446 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004447 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
4448 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
4449 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004450 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
4451 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004452 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004453
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004454 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
4455 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
4456 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
4457 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004458 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004459 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004460
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004461 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004462 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
4463 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004464 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
4465 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004466 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004467
4468 return false;
4469}
4470
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004471/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
4472static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
4473 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
4474 if (!C)
4475 return false;
4476
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00004477 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004478 return false;
4479
4480 if (C->isNullValue()) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00004481 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004482 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004483
4484 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
4485 // control flow (eg. calls)
4486 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I); &*i != Use; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00004487 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004488 return false;
4489
4490 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
4491 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
4492 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
4493 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
4494
4495 // Look through bitcasts.
4496 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
4497 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
4498
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00004499 // Load from null is undefined.
4500 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00004501 if (!LI->isVolatile())
4502 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004503
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00004504 // Store to null is undefined.
4505 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00004506 if (!SI->isVolatile())
4507 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 && SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004508 }
4509 return false;
4510}
4511
4512/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00004513/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004514static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
4515 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
4516 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
4517 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
4518 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
4519 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
4520 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
4521 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
4522 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
4523 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
4524 // destination from conditional branches.
4525 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4526 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
4527 else
4528 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1) :
4529 BI->getSuccessor(0));
4530 BI->eraseFromParent();
4531 return true;
4532 }
4533 // TODO: SwitchInst.
4534 }
4535
4536 return false;
4537}
4538
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00004539bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00004540 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004541
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004542 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004543 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004544
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00004545 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
4546 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Ramkumar Ramachandra181233b2015-01-13 04:17:47 +00004547 if ((pred_empty(BB) &&
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004548 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00004549 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00004550 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
Chris Lattner7eb270e2008-12-03 06:40:52 +00004551 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004552 return true;
4553 }
4554
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00004555 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
4556 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00004557 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00004558
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00004559 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
4560 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
4561
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004562 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
4563 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
4564
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00004565 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
4566 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
4567 // if there are no PHI nodes.
4568 //
4569 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
4570 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004571
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00004572 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
4573
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00004574 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
4575 // eliminate it, do so now.
4576 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
4577 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004578 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00004579
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004580 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004581 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004582 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00004583 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004584 } else {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004585 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004586 }
4587 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004588 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder)) return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00004589 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
4590 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004591 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004592 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004593 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
4594 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
4595 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004596 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
4597 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
4598 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI)) return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00004599 }
4600
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00004601 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004602}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00004603
4604/// SimplifyCFG - This function is used to do simplification of a CFG. For
4605/// example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop, it
4606/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
4607/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
4608///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004609bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004610 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC) {
4611 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
4612 BonusInstThreshold, AC).run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00004613}